OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 FIAT
®
500/500c
FIAT
®
500/500c
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing
& Corporate Communication S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
16FF500-126-AE
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................81
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................135
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................223
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................307
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................347
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .....................................................411
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................419
10
INDEX .....................................................................429
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be as-
sured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc-
tive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that
FCA US LLC offers to its customers:
• The Warranty with terms and conditions for maintain-
ing its validity
• The range of additional services available to FCA US
LLC customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on
the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............11
▫ Mechanical Ignition Key Removal ..........11
▫ Locking Doors With A Key................13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................13
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................13
▫ Replacement Keys .....................14
▫ General Information ....................14
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ..............15
▫ To Arm The System.....................15
▫ To Disarm The System: ..................15
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED ....16
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........16
▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press...............................16
▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function .......17
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............18
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........18
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement .............18
▫ General Information ....................20
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................20
2
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ..........22
▫ Auto Door Locks ......................23
䡵 POWER WINDOWS .....................23
▫ Power Window Switches .................23
▫ Auto-Down ..........................24
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................25
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................25
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........26
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............26
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................28
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........39
▫ Child Restraints .......................55
▫ Transporting Pets ......................75
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....75
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................76
▫ Transporting Passengers..................76
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................77
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................78
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................80
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains a mechanical integrated key. To use
the mechanical key, simply push the mechanical key
release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the autho-
rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys.
Mechanical Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the mechanical ignition switch.
Mechanical Key Release Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
Mechanical Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the
key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a
signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle. When having the
Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all ve-
hicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition for unauthorized
operation. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security
Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Push the key fob LOCK button.
To Disarm The System:
Push the key fob UNLOCK button or cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has oc-
curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five
seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the key fob. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Key Fob
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Power Top Remote Function
The remote keyless power top function can only be used
with the engine off.
NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be
used to open the power top to the spoiler position.
Opening Power Top Remote Function:
1. OPEN — Push and hold the unlock button down on
the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate
Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening when-
ever the unlock button on the key fob is released, or
when it reaches the spoiler position.
NOTE: If your power convertible top does not open with
the remote, please refer to the ⬙Power Convertible Top
Relearn Procedure” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
1 — Unlock/Power Top Open button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you:
• Before operating the power top, make sure that no
moving parts of the convertible top can injure a
person or animal.
• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the convertible top components, the upper wind-
shield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or
the convertible top stowage area while raising or
lowering the convertible top.
• When using the power top button on key fob, if
potential danger exists while lowering the top,
release the button immediately to interrupt the
operation.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock
all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash
and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing” for further information.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the
mechanical key to access the battery case screw lo-
cated on the side of the key fob.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the RKE Key
Fob using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
Mechanical Key Release Button Key Fob Screw Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from
inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door
handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the
door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed,
the door will lock.
Battery Case Removed
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmis-
sion into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the park-
ing brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
Driver’s Door Lock Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver
door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door handle is pushed
a red lock indicator will show on the driver’s door handle
(indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will
lock.
NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the
vehicle, the doors will automatically unlock if the driv-
er’s door handle is pushed when the key is in the
ignition.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Door Locks
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicles speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls located on the shifter
bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the
driver and passenger door windows. The window con-
trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
(Continued)
Driver’s Power Door Lock Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
WARNING! (Continued)
location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Auto-Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch for approximately one
Power Window Switches
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
second, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and release the
switch.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate the
power door lock switches located on the driver door
handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
NOTE: Gas props support the liftgate in the open posi-
tion. However, because the gas pressure drops with
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START posi-
tion.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the AVV/START position, an intermittent
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START position
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
Positioning The Lap Belt
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
• ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental
Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or AIRBAG
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment
of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side
of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pushed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pushing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the
ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR to
ignition STOP. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Action Customer Will See
1. Turn Ignition OFF.
(Turn Signal Switch Must
Be Placed In Neutral
State).
2. Turn Ignition ON. Left Turn Light Is OFF.
Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Signal
Light BLINKS.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
Customer Action Customer Will See
6. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Light
Is ON SOLID.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must Be Placed In
Neutral State).
Left Turn light Is OFF.
Right Turn Light is OFF.
8. Turn Ignition OFF.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers
OFF (Manually).
System is now reset and
the engine may be
started.
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
AVV/START or MAR position. If the ignition switch is in
the STOP position the air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the MAR position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the MAR position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-
index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a
Convertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat of the
vehicle
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be at-
tached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be
removed?
Yes Yes, all may be removed
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
LATCH Anchorages
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable (ALR) Seat
Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes Yes, all may be removed
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an
ALR retractor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Oc-
cupant Restraints” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED . .84
▫ Lowering The Power Top.................85
▫ Raising The Power Top ..................85
▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure .....86
▫ Wind Stop ...........................88
䡵 MIRRORS .............................88
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror .................88
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .88
▫ Power Mirrors ........................89
▫ Folding Mirrors........................91
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............91
▫ Sun Visors ...........................92
䡵 SEATS ...............................92
▫ Forward/Rearward Adjustment ............93
▫ Recline Adjustment .....................94
▫ Seat Height Adjustment ..................94
▫ EZ Entry Feature.......................95
▫ Memory Feature .......................96
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ..............96
▫ Head Restraints .......................97
3
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........101
䡵 LIGHTS .............................103
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................103
▫ Headlights ..........................103
▫ High Beams .........................104
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................104
▫ Parking Lights .......................104
▫ Daytime Running Lights ................105
▫ Turn Signals .........................105
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................106
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .........106
▫ Interior Lights .......................106
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............108
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......108
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation .........108
▫ Rear Windshield Wiper .................110
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . .111
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........112
▫ To Activate ..........................113
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................114
▫ To Deactivate.........................114
▫ To Resume Speed......................114
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............114
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............116
䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ........116
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors.................117
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display ..........117
▫ Rear Park Assist Display ................117
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts............118
▫ Failure Indications .....................120
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System .......121
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions .......121
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .........123
▫ To Open ............................124
▫ To Close ............................124
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................125
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................125
▫ Emergency Operation...................125
▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped ...............126
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........126
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED ..........129
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................129
䡵 STORAGE ............................130
▫ Glove Compartment ...................130
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................131
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............133
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................133
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED
On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the
power convertible top switch is located on the overhead
console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger
side button, is used to open the power top, and the driver
side button, is used to close the power top.
NOTE:
• The power top buttons will operate when the ignition
switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The power top can be remotely operated with the key
fob. Refer to “Opening Power Top Remote Function”
in “Things To Know Before Starting” for more infor-
mation.
• The soft top cannot be lowered in temperatures lower
than –22°F (-30°C) but it can be closed at temperatures
as low as –4° F (-20°C).
• The highest temperature that the convertible top is
operational is at 176°F (80°C).
Power Convertible Top Switch
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Power Top
Auto Open
Push the top open button approximately one second for
the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top
open button for approximately one second a second time
to fully open the convertible top.
Manual Open
For manual open, push and hold the open button until
desired roof position or until spoiler position.
NOTE:
• Vertical movement only operates in auto open/close
mode.
• If you are traveling at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h)
and wish to open the top, it will open to only three-
quarter of the way.
Raising The Power Top
Auto Close
From the convertible top fully open position, push the
top close button for approximately one second for the
three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close
button for approximately one second a second time for
the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close
button to fully close convertible top.
Manual Close
For manual close, push and hold the close button until
desired position until one-quarter open position. Push
and hold again for full close position.
NOTE:
• If the top is three-quarter of the way open, you can
close the top if vehicle speeds are above 50 mph
(80 km/h).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
• If the top is fully open and the vehicle is traveling at
50 mph (80 km/h) or above, it will not allow you to
close the top.
NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000
cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for information.
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is impor-
tant that all occupants wear their seat belts at all
times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are
ejected from the vehicle during a collision.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam-
age the top material. Also, increased water pressure
may force water past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the top
is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s
interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure
If your power convertible top does not operate in the
Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open
comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top
function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open -
the following relearn procedure may be necessary.
1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed.
2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using
manual mode).
3. Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully
open position.
4. CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an addi-
tional three seconds.
5. Release the OPEN button.
6. Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully
closed position.
7. CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top
begins to cycle fully open, then release the CLOSED
button.
At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the
fully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open
position.
This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success-
ful.
Auto Open/Close will now be functional. Trunk lid
operation will be functional. Remote Keyless Power Top
Function will be functional.
NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity.
If the power convertible top does not relearn, repeat the
procedure a second time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Wind Stop
The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle.
The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top opera-
tion. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. The
On/Off symbol on the button will illuminate when the
auto-dimming feature is enabled.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select
switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push the mirror select switch to either the L (left)
or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Spotter Mirror — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter
mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of
visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Power Mirror Switches
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Spotter Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun
visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjusting Bar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Recline Adjustment
The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline
lever, lean back until the desired position has been
reached, and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump
the lever downward to lower the seat height.
Recline Lever
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
EZ Entry Feature
The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry
feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the
release lever, located on the outboard side of the seatback,
dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward
to allow access in and out of the rear seat.
Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to
its locked position once the rear passengers are seated.
Height Adjuster
EZ Entry Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Memory Feature
Both front seats have a memory feature, which can
operate in two ways:
Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back And
Track Fore/Aft Position Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and
the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the
position they were most recently adjusted to. This is
accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its
last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is
returned upright.
Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only
Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first
be returned upright prior to going back to the last
fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in
the seat back memory being set only – The track will then
be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory posi-
tion. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to
reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat has to be
returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track
position as described in Memory Function Option 1.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
Push the switch once to turn on the heated
seats. Push the switch a second time to shut the
heating elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear-
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact
the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend
forward minimizing the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to
their normal position following a rear impact. If the
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal
position, see your authorized dealership immediately.
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealership.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or por-
table DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occu-
pant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for information on tether routing.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located
on the left kick panel, rearward.
2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the
hood, near the center, and raise the hood.
Hood Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left
side when standing in front of the hood) of the engine
compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of
hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position.
In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop
rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod.
Hood Safety Latch Location Hood Prop Rod
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.
NOTE: The headlights can only be turned on with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up-
ward to the first detent for headlight operation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multi-
function lever towards the instrument panel to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
Headlight Operation
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRL.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using
the display menus. Refer to “UConnect settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Turn Signals
Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right
turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspond-
ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to
indicate the operation of the turn signal.
NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when
the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is
returned to a straight position.
Turn Signal Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/
LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction lever toward
the steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the
lever is pulled, the activation of the lights will be
extended by 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can
be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the left overhead, push the switch to
the right from its center position and the lights are always
on. Push the switch to the left from its center position and
the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center
position, and the lights are turned on and off when the
doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side
of the overhead console controls the map or reading
function of the lights. Push the switch to the right to turn
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
on the right light and push the switch to the left to turn
on the left light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
• When one door is opened a three minute timer is
activated.
• When the key is removed from the ignition (within
two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights
will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
• When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is
activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, just below the radio.
Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Push
the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes:
Fog Light Switch
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers
will operate intermittently.
NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent but
wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. As
vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease.
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The
wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the
wipers will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rear Windshield Wiper
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever
upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for intermittent wipe operation. With the front wind-
shield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield
wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate
in the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at
half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into
REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at
Low Speed and return to normal operation when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and
hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers
will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever
is released.
TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on
the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal
controls.
Rear Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock
the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Tilt Control Lever
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the
set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
during a parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist
System Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this
system and recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the
rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the
corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would
clear the underside of the vehicle during the parking
maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning screen is located within the
Uconnect Settings. It provides audible and visual warn-
ings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to ⬙Uconnect
Settings⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for
further information.
Rear Park Assist Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
arcs in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show solid arcs in the center rear region and
will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs and the
audible alert becomes more frequent.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show solid arcs in the left and/or
right rear region and will produce an audible alert. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more
frequent.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission
is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the dis-
tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succes-
sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than
12 in (30 cm) away.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present
within the sensors’
field of view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the
distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information).
Visual signal (EVIC)
• Arcs are shown based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear Park Assist
Display” for further information).
Failure Sensor or System
failures
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) (where provided).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the
distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this
condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is
turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during
maneuvers parallel to walls).
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the
instrument panel warning icon and message displayed
on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
display.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
is displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped).
Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the
Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference
to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor
fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is
turned off automatically.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the va-
por jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your surround-
ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
• Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve-
hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
when the warning display turns on the single
flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also,
the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
(Continued)
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead
console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
WARNING! (Continued)
to children. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
To Open
Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for
approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at
the vented position. Push the switch a second time and
hold for approximately one second and release, the
sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation,
any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
To Close
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power
sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second,
the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the
switch a second time and hold for approximately one
second to completely close the sunroof.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Emergency Operation
In case of electrical failure, the sunroof can be operated
with the hex wrench that is located in the glove compart-
ment. There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof
opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug
reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the
sunroof. Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the
sunroof to the desired location.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Sun Shade — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a
fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or
closed. To open the sun shade, push the tab and move the
shade to a full open position.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet,
located in the floor console, for added convenience. This
power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and
other low power devices.
Manual Sun Shade Power Outlet
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or
accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the
heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Location – Underhood
F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console/Aux Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
This is located on the center console, in front of the cup
holders. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release the
knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically returns
to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned
off.
CUPHOLDERS
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo-
cated on the floor console between the front seats.
Front Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the
floor between the front driver and passenger seats.
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel. Pull outward on the glove compart-
ment latch to open the glove compartment. Push the
glove compartment door upward to close it.
Rear Cupholders
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow
increased cargo capacity.
Push down the release button, located at the outboard
top of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded-
down position to provide a flat load floor cargo area.
Glove Compartment Latch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
When returning the seatback to its upright position, push
rearward until the seatback is properly latched.
Rear Seat Release Buttons
Folded Rear Seats
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located in the
center of the instrument panel, below the radio.
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An
indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20
minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the
button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........137
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS ................138
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......146
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............147
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............159
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............172
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............174
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ............175
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) .......................176
▫ EVIC Control Buttons ..................176
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu .........................177
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System ........179
▫ Trip Computer .......................180
▫ Trip Button ..........................180
▫ Tire Pressure .........................181
▫ Trip Functions .......................181
▫ Values Displayed ......................182
▫ Submenu Personal Settings ..............184
4
䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................191
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS ...................193
䡵 IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................193
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................194
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................195
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............195
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0 Settings ..................195
䡵 UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ..........................203
▫ Introducing Uconnect...................203
▫ Get Started ..........................203
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................205
▫ Radio ..............................205
▫ Media..............................206
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................207
▫ Radio Operation And Mobile Phones........208
▫ Harmful Interference Statement............209
▫ Additional Information .................209
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......209
▫ Radio Operation ......................210
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .211
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................211
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ......211
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......214
▫ Operating Tips .......................219
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Side Vent 7 — Passenger Air Bag 13 — Storage Compartment
2 — Multifunction Lever – Light Control 8 — Glove Compartment 14 — Gear Selector
3—
Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights
9 — Rear Defrost Button 15 — Sport Button
4 — Windshield Wiper, Washer,
Trip Computer
10 — Hazard Button 16 — Horn/Driver Airbag
5 — Central Air Vents
11 — Climate Controls
6 — Storage Compartment/Radio
12 — Power Windows Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
Your vehicle is equipped with one of the following Instrument Clusters.
Lounge Instrument Cluster Base
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lounge Instrument Cluster Sport Mode
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Sport Instrument Cluster Base
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sport Instrument Cluster Sport Mode
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Sport Turbo Instrument Cluster Base
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sport Turbo Instrument Cluster Sport Mode
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
1. Tachometer
• This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
2. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The digital gauge will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The digital display shows the amount of fuel in the
tank.
• The switching on of the digital warning light indi-
cates that 1 – 1.3 gallons of fuel are left in the tank; in
this situation, refuel as soon as possible.
• Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty; any
gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalytic
converter.
5. Base and Sport Mode Gauge Displays
Depending on what options and trim level, your vehicle
may be equipped with two gauge displays available with
the push of the Sport Mode button.
• Instant Consumption Bargraph: This bargraph
shows the instant fuel consumption, the style
changes according to vehicle version while mini-
mum and maximum values change depending on
selected unit. The possible labels are:
• mpg
• Km/l
• l/100 km
• “Sport Mode” — Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge: This
gauge shows what percent the gas pedal is currently
depressed at.
• “Sport Mode” — The active Instrument Cluster
Display screen will change to the G-Force screen.
NOTE: Different trips may have different values even if
the same driving style is maintained. Some factors that
may impact the calculated index value are:
• Traffic conditions
• Trip duration
• Temperature (engine and ambient)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If
Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake
Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The
light should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not
illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-
gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies.”
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-
perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-
vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-
mation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale Light What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
• Driver’s Door Open
• Passenger Door Open
• Driver and Passenger Door Open
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the Instrument Cluster Display and a
buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. This light indicates that the transmission fluid tem-
perature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine
at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase the engine speed RPM until the Trans-
mission Temperature light turns off. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains
after restarting the engine.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Hood Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the en-
gine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilo-
meters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
manually turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds and flash the ESC activation light
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. For further information, refer
to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.
Rear Defrost Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Defrost Light
This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window de-
froster automatically turns off after 20 minutes..
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indi-
cate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and
stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be-
come inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further in-
formation.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Generic Warning Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Generic Warning Indicator Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Oil
Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off
Not Available, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Failure.
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate if one or more of the stop light bulb fails.
The failure relating to this light could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F
(–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not
been used. The Glow Plug light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 seconds.
If equipped with a block heater harness the message ⬙Plug In Engine Heater⬙, will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5°F (-15° C) at the
time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Tell-
tale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as se-
lected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
EVIC Control Buttons
Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the
EVIC. Push and hold the MENU button (approximately
one second) to return to the main screen.
Push and release the UP
arrow button to scroll
upward through the displayed menu and the related
options or to increase the displayed value.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to scroll
downward through the displayed menu and the re-
lated options or to decrease the value displayed.
NOTE: UP
and DOWN arrow buttons activate
different functions according to the following situa-
tions:
• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
• To increase or decrease values during settings.
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC
display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers
covered (if equipped) for a few seconds.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu
EVIC Menu Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Push and release the UP
and DOWN arrow
buttons to access the different options and settings
(setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU
button. A single push on the UP
or DOWN arrow
button will scroll through the setup menu options. The
menu includes the following functions:
• Buzzer Volume
• Service (Only if equipped)
• Headlight Adjustment (Only if equipped)
• Trip B Data
• Audio Repetition
• Navigation Repetition — If Equipped
1. Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the main menu option to set.
EVIC Menu Screen Continued
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button (by single pushes) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
1. Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub-
menu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button (by single pushes) to scroll through all the
submenu options.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the displayed submenu option and to open the rel-
evant setup menu.
4. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button (by single pushes) to select the new setting
for this submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main
menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
display in the EVIC display for approximately 5 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (do not
start the engine.)
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays informa-
tion such as trip information, range, fuel consumption,
average speed, and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 miles or
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59
(999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto-
matically.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for
over 2 seconds to reset trip information.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than
one second.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing settings.
Tire Pressure
This function will be used to display the tire pressures
individually for all four tires by location.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new
trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance A
• Average consumption
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance B
• Average consumption
• Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time)
“Current Trip” can be used to display the figures relating
to:
• Range
• Instantaneous consumption
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip
B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption”
cannot be reset.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire
pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the
above notes.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Economy
This value shows the approximate average consumption
since the last reset.
Instantaneous Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func-
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Submenu Personal Settings
Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning
Buzzer Volume)
With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany-
ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to
Low, Medium, High.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU
button. Push
and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button,
then highlight the Buzzer Volume. Push and release
the MENU
button to enter the Buzzer Volume
MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button for setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU
button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU
button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Buzzer Volume Submenu Display
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buzzer Volume Submenu Settings:
• Off
• Low
• Medium
• High
• Return to MENU
Service – If Equipped
This function allows you to display the information
about mileage intervals for servicing your car.
Service Submenu Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
To view this information, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to enter the
Main MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button to select Service. Push and release the
MENU button, push and release the UP
or
DOWN arrow button to select Speed Limit
activation (On) or deactivation (Off).
NOTE: IMPORTANT The “Scheduled Servicing Plan”
includes car maintenance at fixed intervals.
This is displayed automatically, with ignition key at
MAR-ON, before servicing or, where provided, 30 days
before servicing.
Headlight Adjustment – If Equipped
When this function is activated the cluster will display
the headlight adjustment features.
Headlight Adjustment Submenu Display
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the desired headlight setting, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU
button. Push
and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
to highlight Headlight Adjustment. Push and re-
lease the MENU
button to enter the Headlight
Adjustment MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button to select the desired setting (0 – 3.)”
3. Briefly push and release the MENU
button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU
button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen.
Headlight Adjustment Submenu Settings:
• 2
• 3
• 0
• 1
• Return to MENU
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Trip B Data (Trip B On)
Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.
For further information, see “Trip Computer.”
For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU
button.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button to select Trip B data. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button to turn ON or OFF
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to
the main screen without storing the settings.
Trip B Data Submenu Settings:
• On
• Off
• Return to MENU
Trip B Submenu Display
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio Repetition (Repeat Audio Information)
With this function active, the Instrument Cluster Display
shows information relevant to the sound system.
• Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning
activation or AutoStore.
• CD audio, CD MP3: track number.
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system
info displaying, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU
button. Push
and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
to highlight See Radio and push and release the
MENU
button.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button for setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU
button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Audio Repetition Submenu Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
If the radio has Uconnect, refer to the appropriate
“Uconnect Radio Supplement” for further information.
Audio Repetition Submenu Settings:
• Off
• On
• Return to MENU
Navigation Repetition — If Equipped
With this function active, the Instrument Cluster Display
shows information relevant to the navigation system.
• The turn by turn indication
Navigation Repetition Submenu Display
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The distance to next maneuver
• The name of the street (1 or 2 lines)
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the navigation
system info displaying, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU
button. Push
and release the UP
or DOWN button to
highlight Navigation Repetition and push and re-
lease the MENU
button
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU
button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU
button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings
• Off
• On
• Return to MENU
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Di-
agnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB or AUX port, located in the center
console.
USB/AUX Port
1 — Auxiliary Cable Jack
2 — USB Connector
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the
Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In
addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and
back arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out
of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Settings
Push the Settings
button on the faceplate, to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access programmable feature
settings.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back
button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “AVV/ACC” position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select the “Auto” or
“Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press
and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the
touchscreen.
• Brightness
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights on or off. Adjust the
brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the
touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale be-
tween the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
• Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Español/Français) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button
on the touchscreen, then press the desired language
button on the touchscreen.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press
the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen then
“On” or “Off.”
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID). The following select-
able units of measure are listed below:
• US
Changes the EVIC/DID to US units of measure.
• Metric
Changes the EVIC/DID to Metric units of measure.
• Custom
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km”
or “km/L.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi” or “kPa.”
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Long.”
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or
“Never.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Set Time and Format
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time and Format” button then
choose from a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the
corresponding arrow above and below the current time
to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
• Show Time Status
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the
touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”
• Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press
the corresponding arrows above and below the current
date to adjust.
• Sync Time — If Equipped
When in this display, you may sync the time with GPS.
Press the “Sync Time” button on the touchscreen and
select from “ON” or “OFF.”
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen the following setting will be available:
• Hill Start Assist
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and
select “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
while the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following setting will be available.
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
• Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first push of the Key Fob UNLOCK button,
you must push the Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to
unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all
of the doors will unlock on the first press of the Key Fob
UNLOCK button.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
• Radio Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a
preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP/OFF.
To change the Radio Off Delay status, press the “0 MIN”
or “20 MIN” button on the touchscreen to select your
desired time interval.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance settings.
• Auto-On Radio
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
To make your selection, press the “Auto-On Radio”
button, then select from “On,” “Off,” or “Recall last.”
• Radio Off With Door
When this feature is selected, the radio will remain on
until the driver or passenger door is opened or when the
Radio Off Delay time expires. To make your selection,
press the “Radio Off w/Door” button on the touchscreen
and select from “On” or “Off.”
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song.
This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the back-
ground, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that
you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song
with only a few seconds left to play. To make your
selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touch-
screen, select “On” or “Off.”
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select “Yes” to restore, or “No” to exit. Once the settings
are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to
default.⬙
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” or “No”
to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears
stating ⬙Personal data cleared”.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0
system.
Key Features:
• 5.0” Full Color Touchscreen Display
• Bluetooth With Integrated Voice Control
• GPS Navigation (If Equipped)
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
Uconnect 5.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or PHONE button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or PHONE button and saying a
Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push to MUTE
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
3 — Push To End Call
4 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Uconnect 5.0 VR
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and
Auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod devices.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the PHONE button
and say Listen. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
Uconnect 5.0 Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the PHONE button
. After the beep, say... “Re-
ply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
later.
I need direc-
tions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation.
Harmful Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/
enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary
dials and one inner push knob.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
1. Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to
the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
2. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
3. Recirculation Control
Rotate this control to change the system between recir-
culation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-
lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection.
4. Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be ad-
justed to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor
outlets.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
ture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and
side window demister outlets. Use this mode
with maximum blower and temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
5. A/C Button
Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation
modes at the same time.
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the
occupant to select a comfort settings.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for op-
timum comfort and convenience.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the occupant.
1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button
Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recir-
culation automatically. Push and release to select. Per-
forming this function will cause the ATC to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to
“Automatic Operation” for more information.
Automatic Temperature Controls
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. A/C Button
Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
3. Temperature Control Up Button
Provides temperature up control. Push the button for
warmer temperature settings.
4. Blower Control Up/Down Buttons
There are 12 fixed blower speeds. The blower control
up/down buttons regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower
speed increases as you push, or hold, the blower control
up button and decreases when you push, or hold, the
blower control down button.
The blower fan speed may be set to any fixed speed by
pushing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan
will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds
are selected. This allows the front occupants to control
the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
AUTO mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
5. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting works best
in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode.
6. Front Defrost
Push and release to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates
when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
and side window demist outlets. When the defrost but-
ton is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting and defogging. Per-
forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into
manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the
climate system will return the previous setting.
7. Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets. Performing this function
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
8. Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow. Performing this function will cause the ATC to
switch into manual mode.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
9. Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor
mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators
illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch into manual mode.
10. Temperature Control Down Button
Provides temperature down control. Push the button for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: If the temperature is lowered until ⬙LO⬙ is dis-
played, all high voltage Heating, Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) systems are deactivated and am-
bient air is circulated according to the Heating, Ventila-
tion, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) control settings.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button
Push and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF.
12. Recirculation Control Button
Push and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE: When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button
will flash if pushed. This indicates that you can not
proceed to this mode due to fogging risk.
Climate Control Functions
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active
to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid-
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION
control button. Recirculation mode should only be used
temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate when
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
this button is selected. Push the button a second time to
turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside
air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (indicator light shall blink) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Con-
trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recircula-
tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se-
lected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate
when on.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the temperature con-
trol buttons. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features”
in this section of the manual.
Manual Operation
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation
control.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
Defrost mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Summer Operation
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recir-
culation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while
in automatic mode.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the air conditioning system
is started again.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................227
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......227
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....227
▫ Normal Starting.......................227
▫ Cold Weather Operation ................228
▫ Extended Park Starting..................228
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................229
▫ After Starting ........................230
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” ..............230
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .230
▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission...........230
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ..............232
▫ Downshifting ........................233
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................233
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............235
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .235
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission .........235
▫ Gear Ranges .........................236
䡵 AUTOSTICK ..........................242
5
▫ Operation ...........................242
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........243
▫ Acceleration .........................243
▫ Traction ............................244
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............244
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................245
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................245
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................246
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................248
䡵 SPORT MODE .........................250
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped........250
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped......251
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................252
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .252
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .252
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............254
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............254
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................255
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........256
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ................260
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............261
▫ Tire Markings ........................261
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........265
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........266
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........268
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........273
▫ Tire Pressure ........................273
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................274
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .276
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................276
▫ Tire Types ...........................277
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............279
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............279
▫ Tire Spinning ........................283
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................283
▫ Life Of Tire .........................284
▫ Replacement Tires .....................285
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......287
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....288
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) .......................289
▫ Premium TPM System With Comfort Cluster . .292
▫ Premium TPM System With (TFT) Tire Pressure
Display Screen........................294
▫ General Information ...................297
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L/1.4L Turbo
Engine ..............................298
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................298
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............299
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......299
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................300
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................300
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................301
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............302
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................302
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............302
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............304
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................304
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................305
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .305
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the park-
ing brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock-
ing ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. An externally-
powered electric engine block heater is available as
optional equipment or from your authorized dealer.
The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is
below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next
cold start.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended oil and adhering to the
prescribed oil change intervals is important to pre-
vent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting
in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds, cycle
the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait
five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Turbocharger “Cool Down”
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-
tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE: To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, lift the
ring under the knob and, at the same time move the gear
selector to the right and then backward.
Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third gear.
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must
be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear. When
selecting REVERSE gear, the driver should pause (ap-
proximately 2 seconds) after pushing in the clutch pedal
and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to
stop spinning. Should an unwanted clash noise be pro-
duced, the pause length should be increased.
Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
NOTE:
• Clashing REVERSE gear, especially if vehicle is mov-
ing, can result in transmission damage.
• During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant
is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the trans-
mission.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following
table.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units In mph (km/h)
Engine Size Acceleration
Rate
1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5
1.4L/1.4L Turbo
Engine
Accel 14
(23)
23
(37)
29
(47)
38
(61)
Cruise 12
(19)
18
(29)
25
(40)
32
(52)
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first gear when descending a steep
grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an
automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn
the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and
remove the ignition key. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, an automatic
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
hicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be re-
moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the trans-
mission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned
to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the gear
selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, RE-
VERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Gear Selector
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an
automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn
the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and
remove the ignition key. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, an automatic
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
hicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the selector all
the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
WARNING! (Continued)
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick
in this section for further information) to select a lower
gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller will expand the
range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is
done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat-
ing.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine coolant temperature.
Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera-
ture has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illu-
minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the Drive position), it can be moved forward and
rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the gear selector
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or third
gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful
in snow or icy conditions. To select second or third
gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the gear
selector rearward (+) once or twice.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The system will ignore shift commands that would
cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep
will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced or no power steer-
ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon as pos-
sible.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” message is displayed on the EVIC
screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers
may have occurred which caused an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once driving
conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for
a few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Steering icon, and the ⬙SERVICE POWER STEER-
ING - ASSIST OFF⬙ message is displayed on the EVIC
screen, the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized
dealer for service. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
Parking Brake
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmis-
sion in FIRST gear or REVERSE gear. Failure to do
so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage
or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
SPORT MODE
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver
with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal-to-engine
response. This driving mode is useful while driving on
twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in
spirited cornering.
1. To activate the Sport mode, push the SPORT button.
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate.
SPORT Button
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver
with slight increase in effort and changes the transmis-
sion shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This
driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads
where more steering precision is desired in spirited
cornering.
1. To activate the Sport mode, push the SPORT button.
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Push the SPORT button again to return to the standard
driving mode.
SPORT Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Con-
trol System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or 7%
grade or greater (automatic transmission) hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill
is in REVERSE gear).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in for
further information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle under
various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering
or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of
the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter-
mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com-
pares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering
column (Manual Transmission Only).
ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission) ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific
reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC
Off switch. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle
is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more
wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to
gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily pushing the switch
again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off
mode by pushing the switch. Once the situation requiring
ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome,
turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the switch.
This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
WARNING! (Continued)
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel-
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure –
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con-
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare
tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
(Continued)
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires.
• Due to limited clearance, a 185/55R15 tire with a
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
(Continued)
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Premium TPM System With Comfort Cluster
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
• Text Message Display
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and the “Low inflation pressure left or right
front/rear tire” text message will display when one or
more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text mes-
sage will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this
sequence will repeat providing the system fault still
exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following sce-
narios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
• Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and
the Low inflation pressure left or right front / rear tire
message will still turn ON due to the low tire.
• However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid and the “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message will be displayed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
• This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid and the “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message will be displayed.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Premium TPM System With (TFT) Tire Pressure
Display Screen
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a low
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressure text message and a graphic showing the low
tire pressure tire highlighted in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message in the EVIC for approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
Low Tire Indicator
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message will no longer display.
A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
• The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replace-
ment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor.
• If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
Service TPM System Message
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
EVIC will still display a low pressure message and a
tire highlighted in a different color.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
display a “Service TPM System” message.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a “Service Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System” message.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In addi-
tion, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations, provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline
having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. For optimum perfor-
mance and fuel economy the use of “Premium” 91 octane
gasoline or higher is recommended.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermar-
ket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may
cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
(Continued)
Fuel Filler Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
WARNING! (Continued)
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: When recreational towing your vehicle, always
follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with
the front wheels OFF the ground).
Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be
flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) at any
legal highway speed, for any distance, if the manual
transmission is in NEUTRAL.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........309
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............309
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........310
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................311
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .311
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .........312
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit ........315
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................321
▫ Torque Specifications ...................321
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................323
▫ Jack Location ........................324
▫ Spare Tire Removal ....................324
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................326
▫ Jacking Instructions ...................327
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................334
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................335
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE ............336
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............336
6
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................338
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............340
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............341
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........342
▫ Automatic Transmission .................344
▫ Manual Transmission ...................345
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) .......................345
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ...........345
308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the front driver’s
seat.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the
bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than
1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEU-
TRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
74 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323
Jack Location
The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under
the front driver’s seat.
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the
cargo area.
1. Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area.
Jack And Jack-Handle Location
Winch Access Plug
324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut. Use the wrench
to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on
the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you
to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench tool only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and they can dam-
age the winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the center of the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
Spare Tire Retainer
326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector in PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn Off the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of the
“Tires-General Information” under “Starting And Oper-
ating” for information about the spare tire, it’s use, and
operation.
Jack Warning Label
328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the
driver’s seat.
2. Remove center cap.
NOTE: Before using the swivel wrench to remove the
wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel
by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into
the notched part of the center cap.
Center Cap Removal
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329
3. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
NOTE:
• There are front and rear jacking locations on each
side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift
point symbol on the sill molding)
• Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
Front Jacking Location
330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the
jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest
to the wheel to be changed.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
Rear Jacking Location Jack Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331
5. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the
hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels,
the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel
bolts. For vehicles equipped with steel wheels the
wheel covers must be removed to remove the wheel
bolts.
WARNING!
•
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any
sharp edges.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
7. Install the spare wheel and hand start the wheel bolts.
Lightly tighten the bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing
the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each bolt has been tightened twice. For the correct
wheel bolt torque refer to Torque Specifications in this
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your autho-
rized dealership or service station.
10. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the
bag. Stow it under the driver’s seat and secure the
bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Have
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure as required.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the spare wheel and hand start the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this sec-
tion for correct wheel bolt torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Road Wheel 2— Wheel Cover
334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand. Do
not use a hammer or excessive force to install the
cover.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this sec-
tion for correct wheel bolt torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Spare Tire Stowage
Reverse instructions of the spare removal section.
Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut
clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click
is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield.
336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Battery Posts
1 — Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
2 — Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337
3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+)
battery post. To remove the cover, push the locking tab
and pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear
and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accel-
erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the
engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
3. Remove the gear selector override access cover (lo-
cated on the right side of the gear selector housing) by
prying at the bottom edge of the cover.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the
access hole, and push and hold the override release
lever in.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED If transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 65 mph (104 km/h)
max speed
Wheel Lift Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Automatic Transmission
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of
PARK in order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a
conventional automatic transmission. Damage to
the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require
towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Manual Transmission
• Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L ..........349
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .350
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .351
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................351
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................352
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................354
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................354
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........354
▫ Engine Oil ..........................355
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................359
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................359
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............360
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............361
▫ Body Lubrication .....................365
▫ Wiper Blades ........................366
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................369
▫ Exhaust System ......................369
▫ Cooling System ......................372
7
▫ Brake System ........................378
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......380
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....381
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................383
▫ Convertible Top Care — If Equipped .......391
䡵 FUSES ..............................393
▫ Interior Fuses ........................394
▫ Underhood Fuses......................397
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................400
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................401
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................402
▫ Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam......402
▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime
Running Lamps.......................403
▫ Front Fog Lamps ......................403
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps............404
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps .............................404
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .405
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................406
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................407
▫ Engine .............................407
▫ Chassis ............................409
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses)
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance
and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de-
signed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine
parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by
the manufacturer’s warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil
level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine
is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Maintain the oil level between the range mark-
ings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a
crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when
the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will
result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.4L Engine
SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Stan-
dard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent
is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE
Grade)
MOPAR SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil
filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscrimi-
nately discarded, can present a problem to the environment.
Contact your authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil
filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If
Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoole-
fine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protec-
tion Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low
GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manu-
facturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the
lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the Torx screw that secures the passenger side
console closeout cover.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
Torx Screw Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
3. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (1 and 2) that secure
the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing.
4. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing. Take note of the air filter position
indicators.
Console Closeout Panel Air Filter Cover Screw Locations
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
6. Install the passenger side console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
A/C Air Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up-
ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
Lifting The Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
Removing The Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for fur-
ther information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor lead
before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
WARNING! (Continued)
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL
RANGE”.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also
reduce braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
WARNING! (Continued)
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch
system performance. Improper brake fluids may dam-
age the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch func-
tion and the ability to shift the transmission.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
(Continued)
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Convertible Top Care — If Equipped
NOTE: Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every
2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam-
age the top material. Also, increased water pressure
may force past the weather strips.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the top
is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles
interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicles interior.
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and storage compartment.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
Washing
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
preferred.
CAUTION!
Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force water past the weather strips.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in
partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle
before washing the top. The top should be washed with
a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap
solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use
detergent.
CAUTION!
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol-
vents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering
it into the storage area.
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the
entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and
chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.
Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will
decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt,
and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains
persist, contact your local authorized dealer for further
suggestions.
FUSES
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse
Number
Mini Fuse Description
1 F12 7.5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam
2 F32 5 Amp Tan Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and
Door Courtesy Lights
3 F53 5 Amp Tan Instrument Panel Node
4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking
5 F36 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, Climate
Control System
6 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer
7 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
8 F13 7.5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling
9 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse
Number
Mini Fuse Description
10 F51 5 Amp Tan Vehicle Radio Switch, Climate Control
System, Stop Light, Clutch
11 F37 5 Amp Tan Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
12 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror,
Parking Sensor
13 F31 5 Amp Tan Ignition, Climate Control
14 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Front Distribution Unit
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 20 Amp Yellow – Audio Amplifier
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – Anti-Lock Brake Pump
F05 70 Amp Tan – Electric Power Steering
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Single Speed
F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 40 Amp Orange – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F09 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F10 – 10 Amp Red Horn
F11 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F11 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F14 – 5 Amp Tan High Beam (Shutter)
F15 – 15 Amp Blue Cigar Lighter
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission
F17 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F17 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F18 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F18 – 5 Amp Tan Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats – If Equipped
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Anti-Lock Brake Valves
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown Stability Control System
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps
F82 30 Amp Green – Sunroof/Convertible Top
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Cooling Pump – If Equipped
F84 – 10 Amp Red Transmission
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F85 30 Amp Green – Rear Defroster
F87 – 5 Amp Tan Rear Defroster
F90 – 5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Proce-
dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21/5W
Front Fog Lamps H11LL
Front Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Side Direction Lamps WY5W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
Bulb Number
Rear Tail and Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp W5W
License Plate Lamps LED (See Authorized dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps
1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right.
2. Open the wheel housing access door.
3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp
housing.
4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
7. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer.
Wheel Housing Access Door
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand
access to side marker lamp.
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the wheel liner.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly.
Tail Lamp Assembly Screws
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from
the lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening
screws.
2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly.
3. Disconnect the electric connector.
4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and re-
place it.
6. Close the back cap locking it properly.
7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the
guard caps.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 10.5 Gallons 40 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula) —
with Manual Transmission
4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters
1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula) —
with Automatic Transmission
5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil Filter – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR C635 DDCT/MTX
Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only MOPAR AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid
or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect
the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703
should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Convertible Top Rails – If Equipped We recommend you use Berulub FR 43.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
Inspect brake pads, rotors, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Check and adjust hand brake.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413
Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, and
replace if necessary.
XXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace as necessary.
XXXXXXX
414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect parking brake function.
Adjust as necessary.
XXXXXXX
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs
(1.4L Engine). **
X
Replace spark plugs
(1.4L Turbo Engine). **
XX X X X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
Replace the timing belt. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................421
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............421
▫ Prepare A List ........................421
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............421
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............421
▫ FIAT Customer Center ..................422
▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center ............422
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................423
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........423
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................423
▫ Service Contract ......................423
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............425
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............425
▫
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .425
▫ In Canada...........................425
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 421
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FIAT Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: 1-888-242-6342
FIAT Canada Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-
465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)
422 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 423
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
424 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 425
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance
procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
• Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 427
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............374
Adding Fuel .............................302
Adding Washer Fluid ......................369
Additives, Fuel ...........................300
AirBag...............................39, 40
Advance Front Air Bag .................40, 41
Air Bag Operation .......................42
Air Bag Warning Light ....................52
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................43
Enhanced Accident Response ............50, 345
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..............54, 345
FrontAirBag ........................39, 40
If A Deployment Occurs ...................48
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................43
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............53
Air Bag Deployment ........................39
Air Bag Light .......................52, 78, 147
Air Bag Maintenance .......................53
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .359
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................361
Air Conditioning..........................211
Air Conditioning Controls ...................211
Air Conditioning Filter .....................363
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............219
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............361, 362
Air Conditioning System .............211,214, 361
Air Pressure, Tires.........................274
Alarm
Disarm The System .......................15
Vehicle Security Alarm ....................15
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................15
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............373, 406
Capacities ............................406
Disposal ..............................376
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................252
Anti-Lock Warning Light.................169, 170
Appearance Care .........................383
430 INDEX
Audio Systems (Radio) .....................193
Automatic Dimming Mirror...................88
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ...............412
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........214
Automatic Transaxle ........................11
Automatic Transmission ..............233, 381, 382
Adding Fluid ..........................382
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................382
Fluid Change ..........................382
Fluid Level Check .......................382
Fluid Type ............................409
Gear Ranges ...........................236
Special Additives .......................381
Autostick ...............................242
Battery .............................152, 360
Charging System Light ...................152
Jump Starting ..........................336
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ...............18
Belts, Seat ...............................78
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................365
B-Pillar Location ..........................268
Brake Assist System .......................254
Brake Fluid ..........................407, 409
Brake, Parking ...........................248
Brakes .................................378
Brake System .........................252, 378
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................252
Master Cylinder ........................378
Parking ..............................248
Warning Light .........................150
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................235
Bulb Replacement......................401, 402
Bulbs, Light...........................80, 401
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........406
Capacities, Fluid ..........................406
10
INDEX 431
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................302
Oil (Engine) ....................357, 358, 412
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................77, 302
Cargo Area Features .......................131
Car Washes .............................384
Cellular Phone ...........................211
Chains, Tire .............................287
Change Oil Indicator .......................412
Changing A Flat Tire .......................323
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................263
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .352
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............76
Checks, Safety ............................76
Child Restraint ............................55
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................59
Child Restraints .........................55
Child Seat Installation .....................72
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........68
Infants And Child Restraints ................57
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint ....67
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt ..............................70
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......62
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........58
Seating Positions ........................61
Clean Air Gasoline ........................298
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................385
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................366
Climate Control ..........................211
Clutch .................................378
Clutch Fluid .............................378
Compact Spare Tire........................280
Connector
UCI.................................193
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........193
432 INDEX
Contract, Service ..........................423
Convertible Top Maintenance .................391
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................406, 407
Cooling System...........................372
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............374
Coolant Capacity .......................407
Coolant Level ......................372, 376
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................376
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................373
Inspection ............................376
Points To Remember ..................375, 377
Pressure Cap ..........................375
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ............373
Corrosion Protection .......................383
Cruise Light..........................173, 175
Cupholders .............................129
Customer Assistance .......................421
Customer Programmable Features .............195
Data Recorder, Event .......................54
Daytime Running Lights ....................105
Dealer Service............................354
Defroster, Windshield ....................78, 213
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................351
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ..................382
Disarming, Security System ...................15
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................376
Door Ajar ...........................156, 157
Door Ajar Light .......................156, 157
Door Locks ..............................20
Door Locks, Automatic ......................23
Downshifting ............................233
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................244
10
INDEX 433
Electrical Power Outlets.....................126
Electric Remote Mirrors......................89
Electronic Brake Control System ...............252
Brake Assist System .....................254
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........112
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............256
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........153
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)......176
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................309
Jacking ...............................323
Jump Starting ..........................336
Towing ..............................342
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........352
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................359
Break-In Recommendations .................75
Checking Oil Level ......................355
Compartment .......................349, 350
Cooling ..............................372
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................77, 302
Fails To Start ..........................229
Flooded, Starting .......................229
Fuel Requirements ...................298, 407
Oil ..............................355, 406
Oil Filler Cap .......................357, 358
Oil Filter .............................359
Oil Selection ....................356, 357, 407
Oil Synthetic ..........................358
Overheating ...........................309
Starting ..............................227
Enhanced Accident Response Feature.........50, 345
Ethanol ................................299
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission
Fluid Type ............................381
Event Data Recorder ........................54
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................77, 302
Exhaust System ........................77,
369
434 INDEX
Exterior Lights.........................80, 401
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................359
Air Conditioning .......................363
Engine Fuel ...........................407
Engine Oil ............................359
Engine Oil Disposal .....................359
Flashers
Turn Signal .........................80, 172
Flooded Engine Starting ....................229
Fluid, Brake .............................409
Fluid Capacities ..........................406
Fluid Leaks ..............................80
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................382
Fluids .................................407
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........407
Fog Lights ...........................108, 166
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................340
Fuel...................................298
Adding ..............................302
Additives .............................300
Capacity .............................406
Clean Air .............................298
Ethanol ..............................299
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................302
Gasoline ..............................298
Materials Added ........................300
Methanol .............................299
Requirements ..........................298
Specifications ..........................407
Tank Capacity ..........................406
Fueling ................................302
Fuses ..................................393
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ................302, 304
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................298
10
INDEX 435
Gasoline (Fuel)........................298, 406
Gasoline, Reformulated..................298, 299
Gear Ranges .............................236
Gear Select Lever Override ..................341
General Information .......................297
General Maintenance.......................354
Glass Cleaning ...........................389
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................244
Headlights ..............................103
Cleaning .............................389
Passing ..............................104
Switch ...............................104
Heated Mirrors............................91
Heated Seats .............................96
Heater .................................211
Hill Start Assist...........................255
Holder, Cup .............................129
Hood Release ............................101
Ignition .................................11
Key..................................11
Ignition Key Removal .......................11
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................13
Information Center, Vehicle ..................176
Instrument Cluster .....................155, 172
Instrument Cluster ......................138
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............137
Instrument Panel Cover .....................389
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............390
Interior Appearance Care....................387
Interior Lighting ..........................106
Introduction ..............................4
Jacking Instructions........................327
Jack Location ............................324
436 INDEX
Jack Operation ........................323, 327
Jump Starting ............................336
Key Fob
Disarm The Alarm .......................15
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ....18
Key-In Reminder ..........................13
Key, Replacement ..........................14
Keys ...................................11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................13
Lane Change Assist........................106
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................30
Latches .................................80
Hood ................................101
Lead Free Gasoline ........................298
Leaks, Fluid ..............................80
Life Of Tires .............................284
Liftgate (Sedan) ...........................25
Light Bulbs ...........................80, 401
Lights ...............................80, 103
AirBag .........................52, 78, 147
Brake Assist Warning ....................260
Brake Warning .........................150
Bulb Replacement .......................402
Cruise ............................173, 175
Engine Temperature Warning ...............155
Exterior ...............................80
Fog .................................166
High Beam ............................104
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........164
Park .............................104, 172
Passing ..............................104
Seat Belt Reminder ......................148
Service ...............................402
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............159
Traction Control ........................260
Turn Signal ......................80, 105, 172
10
INDEX 437
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .155, 172
Loading Vehicle
Tires ................................268
Locks
Automatic Door .........................23
Door .................................20
Power Door ............................22
Lubrication, Body .........................365
Lug Nuts ...............................321
Maintenance Free Battery....................360
Maintenance, General ......................354
Maintenance Procedures ....................354
Maintenance Schedule ......................412
Maintenance Schedules .....................412
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .164, 352
Manual, Service ..........................426
Manual Transmission ...................230, 380
Fluid Level Check .......................380
Frequency Of Fluid Change ................381
Lubricant Selection ...................380, 409
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................378
Methanol ...............................299
Mirrors .................................88
Automatic Dimming ......................88
Electric Powered .........................89
Heated ...............................91
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................289
MTBE/ETBE ............................299
Multi-Function Control Lever .................103
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................75
Occupant Restraints ........................26
Oil Change Indicator .......................179
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................179
Oil, Engine .......................355, 406, 407
438 INDEX
Capacity ..........................406, 407
Change Interval ........................356
Checking .............................355
Disposal ..............................359
Filter ................................359
Filter Disposal .........................359
Identification Logo ......................357
Materials Added To ......................358
Pressure Warning Light ...................154
Recommendation .................356, 357, 406
Synthetic .............................358
Viscosity ..........................357, 358
Oil Filter, Change .........................359
Oil Filter, Selection ........................359
Oil Pressure Light .........................154
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................351
Operating Precautions ......................351
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............5
Overheating, Engine .......................309
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........5,426
Paint Care ..............................383
Parking Brake............................248
Passing Light ............................104
Pets....................................75
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........269
Power
Door Locks ............................22
Mirrors ...............................89
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........126
Steering ..............................246
Sunroof ..............................123
Windows ..............................23
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............36
Preparation For Jacking .....................326
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................36
10
INDEX 439
Radial Ply Tires ..........................276
Radio Frequency
General Information ...................14, 20
Radio Operation ..........................211
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) .......................25
Rear Window Features .....................133
Recorder, Event Data .......................54
Recreational Towing .......................305
Reformulated Gasoline .....................298
Refrigerant ..............................362
Release, Hood............................101
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................28
Remote Keyless Entry
Disarm The Alarm .......................15
Power Convertible Top Function .............17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........209
Replacement Bulbs ........................401
Replacement Keys .........................14
Replacement Parts.........................354
Replacement Tires .........................285
Reporting Safety Defects ....................425
Restraints, Child...........................55
Restraints, Occupant ........................26
Rotation, Tires ...........................288
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................78
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................80
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................425
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................77
Safety Information, Tire .....................261
Safety Tips ...............................76
Schedule, Maintenance .....................412
Seat Belt
Energy Management Feature ................37
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................32
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................30
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............34
Pregnant Women ........................36
440 INDEX
Seat Belt Extender .......................35
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................36
Seat Belt Reminder .......................28
Seat Belt System .........................26
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................390
Seat Belt Reminder .........................28
Seat Belts .............................28, 78
Child Restraint ..........................55
Extender ..............................35
Front Seat ........................28, 30, 32
Inspection .............................78
Operating Instructions ....................32
Pregnant Women ........................36
Pretensioners ...........................36
Rear Seat ..............................30
Reminder .............................148
Untwisting Procedure .....................34
Seats ...................................92
Adjustment ............................92
Heated ...............................96
Security Alarm
Disarm The System .......................15
Security Alarm ..........................15
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................13
Service Assistance .........................421
Service Contract ..........................423
Service Manuals ..........................426
Shift Lever Override .......................341
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission .............232
Shoulder Belts ............................30
Signals, Turn.......................80, 105, 172
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................287
Snow Tires ..............................278
Spare Tire.....................279, 280, 281, 282
Spark Plugs .............................407
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ...........................116
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................112
10
INDEX 441
Sport Mode .............................250
Starting ................................227
Automatic Transmission ..................227
Cold Weather ..........................228
Engine Fails To Start .....................229
Manual Transmission ....................227
Steering
Power ...............................246
Tilt Column ...........................111
Wheel, Tilt ............................111
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............209
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .209
Storage ................................400
Storage, Vehicle...........................220
Stuck, Freeing............................340
Sun Roof ...............................123
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........40
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................358
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........214
Tilt Steering Column .......................111
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......268, 269
Tire Markings ............................261
Tires.........................80, 273, 279, 427
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................284
Air Pressure ...........................273
Chains ...............................287
Changing .............................323
Compact Spare .........................280
General Information ..................273, 279
High Speed ...........................276
Inflation Pressures .......................274
Jacking ...............................323
Life Of Tires ...........................284
Load Capacity ......................268, 270
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............289
Pressure Warning Light ...................159
Quality Grading ........................427
442 INDEX
Radial ...............................276
Replacement ...........................285
Rotation ..............................288
Safety ............................261, 273
Sizes ................................263
Snow Tires ............................278
Spare Tire ......................279, 281, 282
Spinning .............................283
Tread Wear Indicators ....................283
Tire Safety Information .....................261
Tire Service Kit . . . .310, 311, 312, 315, 316, 318, 319, 320
To Open Hood ...........................101
Towing ................................304
Disabled Vehicle ........................342
Recreational ...........................305
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........305
Traction .............................243, 244
Traction Control ..........................254
Trailer Towing ...........................304
Transaxle
Automatic .............................11
Transmission ............................381
Automatic .........................233, 381
Fluid ................................381
Manual ..............................230
Transporting Pets ..........................75
Tread Wear Indicators ......................283
Turn Signals..........................105, 172
UCI Connector ...........................193
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................427
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .193
Unleaded Gasoline ........................298
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................34
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............7
Vehicle Loading ..........................270
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............8
10
INDEX 443
Vehicle Security Alarm Disarming ..............15
Vehicle Storage........................220, 400
Warnings And Cautions ......................7
Warranty Information ....................4,425
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................369
Washers, Windshield....................108, 110
Washing Vehicle ..........................384
Water
Driving Through ........................244
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................385
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................385
Wind Buffeting ........................25, 125
Window Fogging .........................219
Windows ................................23
Power ................................23
Windshield Defroster ....................78, 213
Windshield Washers ....................108, 110
Windshield Wiper Blades....................366
Windshield Wipers ........................108
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................366
444 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 FIAT
®
500/500c
FIAT
®
500/500c
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing
& Corporate Communication S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
16FF500-126-AE
